1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2023 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 217 */ 218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 224 }; 225 226 /** 227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 228 * 229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 231 * 232 * @def: the channel definition 233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 242 */ 243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 246 247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 248 249 bool radar_enabled; 250 251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 252 }; 253 254 /** 255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 258 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 266 * for changes/removal.) 267 */ 268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 275 * 276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 279 * done. 280 * 281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 285 */ 286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 291 }; 292 293 /** 294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 295 * 296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 298 * 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 300 * also implies a change in the AID. 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 310 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 324 * changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 329 * context had been assigned. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 333 * keep alive) changed. 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 342 * status changed. 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING: The channel puncturing bitmap changed. 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 345 */ 346 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 347 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 350 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 351 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 352 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 353 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 354 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 356 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 357 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 358 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 359 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 360 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 361 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 362 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 363 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 364 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 365 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 366 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 367 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 368 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 369 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 370 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 371 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 372 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 373 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 374 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 376 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 377 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 378 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 379 BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING = BIT_ULL(32), 380 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 381 382 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 383 }; 384 385 /* 386 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 387 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 388 * filtering will be disabled. 389 */ 390 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 391 392 /** 393 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 394 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 395 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 396 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 397 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 398 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 399 * once each time the timeout triggers. 400 */ 401 enum ieee80211_event_type { 402 RSSI_EVENT, 403 MLME_EVENT, 404 BAR_RX_EVENT, 405 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 406 }; 407 408 /** 409 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 410 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 411 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 412 */ 413 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 414 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 415 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 416 }; 417 418 /** 419 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 420 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 421 */ 422 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 423 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 424 }; 425 426 /** 427 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 428 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 429 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 430 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 431 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 432 */ 433 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 434 AUTH_EVENT, 435 ASSOC_EVENT, 436 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 437 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 438 }; 439 440 /** 441 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 442 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 443 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 444 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 445 */ 446 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 447 MLME_SUCCESS, 448 MLME_DENIED, 449 MLME_TIMEOUT, 450 }; 451 452 /** 453 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 454 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 455 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 456 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 457 */ 458 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 459 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 460 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 461 u16 reason; 462 }; 463 464 /** 465 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 466 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 467 * @tid: the tid 468 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 469 */ 470 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 472 u16 tid; 473 u16 ssn; 474 }; 475 476 /** 477 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 478 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 479 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 480 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 481 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 482 * @u:union holding the fields above 483 */ 484 struct ieee80211_event { 485 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 486 union { 487 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 488 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 489 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 490 } u; 491 }; 492 493 /** 494 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 495 * 496 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 497 * 498 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 499 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 500 */ 501 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 502 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 503 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 504 }; 505 506 /** 507 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 508 * 509 * @lci: LCI subelement content 510 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 511 * @lci_len: LCI data length 512 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 513 */ 514 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 515 const u8 *lci; 516 const u8 *civicloc; 517 size_t lci_len; 518 size_t civicloc_len; 519 }; 520 521 /** 522 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 523 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 524 * 525 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 526 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 527 */ 528 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 529 u32 min_interval; 530 u32 max_interval; 531 }; 532 533 /** 534 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 535 * 536 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 537 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 538 * 539 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 540 * @addr: (link) address used locally 541 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 542 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 543 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 544 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 545 * ACK, BACK or both 546 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 547 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 548 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 549 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 550 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 551 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 552 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 553 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 554 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 555 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 556 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 557 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 558 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 559 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 560 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 561 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 562 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 563 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 564 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 565 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 566 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 567 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 568 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 569 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 570 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 571 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 572 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 573 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 574 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 575 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 576 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 577 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 578 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 579 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 580 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 581 * the current band. 582 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 583 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 584 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 585 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 586 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 587 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 588 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 589 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 590 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 591 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 592 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 593 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 594 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 595 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 596 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 597 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 598 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 599 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 600 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 601 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 602 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 603 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 604 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 605 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 606 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 607 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 608 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 609 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 610 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 611 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 612 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 613 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 614 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 615 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 616 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 617 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 618 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 619 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 620 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 621 * station. 622 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 623 * responder functionality. 624 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 625 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 626 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 627 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 628 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 629 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 630 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 631 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 632 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 633 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 634 * connected to (STA) 635 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 636 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 637 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 638 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 639 * interval. 640 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 641 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 642 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 643 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 644 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 645 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 646 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 647 * @eht_puncturing: bitmap to indicate which channels are punctured in this BSS 648 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 649 * @csa_punct_bitmap: new puncturing bitmap for channel switch 650 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 651 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 652 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 653 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 654 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 655 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 656 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 657 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 658 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 659 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 660 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 661 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 662 * beamformer 663 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 664 * beamformee 665 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 666 * beamformer 667 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 668 * beamformee 669 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 670 * beamformer 671 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 672 * beamformee 673 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 674 * beamformer 675 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 676 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 677 * bandwidth 678 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 679 * beamformer 680 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 681 * beamformee 682 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 683 * beamformer 684 */ 685 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 687 688 const u8 *bssid; 689 unsigned int link_id; 690 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 691 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 692 bool uora_exists; 693 u8 uora_ocw_range; 694 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 695 bool he_support; 696 bool twt_requester; 697 bool twt_responder; 698 bool twt_protected; 699 bool twt_broadcast; 700 /* erp related data */ 701 bool use_cts_prot; 702 bool use_short_preamble; 703 bool use_short_slot; 704 bool enable_beacon; 705 u8 dtim_period; 706 u16 beacon_int; 707 u16 assoc_capability; 708 u64 sync_tsf; 709 u32 sync_device_ts; 710 u8 sync_dtim_count; 711 u32 basic_rates; 712 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 713 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 714 u16 ht_operation_mode; 715 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 716 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 717 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 718 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 719 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 720 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 721 bool qos; 722 bool hidden_ssid; 723 int txpower; 724 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 725 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 726 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 727 u16 max_idle_period; 728 bool protected_keep_alive; 729 bool ftm_responder; 730 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 731 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 732 bool nontransmitted; 733 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 734 u8 bssid_index; 735 u8 bssid_indicator; 736 bool ema_ap; 737 u8 profile_periodicity; 738 struct { 739 u32 params; 740 u16 nss_set; 741 } he_oper; 742 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 743 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 744 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 745 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 746 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 747 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 748 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 749 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 750 u8 pwr_reduction; 751 bool eht_support; 752 u16 eht_puncturing; 753 754 bool csa_active; 755 u16 csa_punct_bitmap; 756 757 bool mu_mimo_owner; 758 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 759 760 bool color_change_active; 761 u8 color_change_color; 762 763 bool ht_ldpc; 764 bool vht_ldpc; 765 bool he_ldpc; 766 bool vht_su_beamformer; 767 bool vht_su_beamformee; 768 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 769 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 770 bool he_su_beamformer; 771 bool he_su_beamformee; 772 bool he_mu_beamformer; 773 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 774 bool eht_su_beamformer; 775 bool eht_su_beamformee; 776 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 777 }; 778 779 /** 780 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 781 * 782 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 783 * 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 786 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 787 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 788 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 789 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 790 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 791 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 792 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 793 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 794 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 795 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 796 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 798 * station 799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 801 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 803 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 804 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 805 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 806 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 807 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 808 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 809 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 810 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 811 * hardware queue. 812 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 813 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 814 * is for the whole aggregation. 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 816 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 818 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 819 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 820 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 821 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 822 * off-channel operation. 823 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 824 * (header conversion) 825 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 826 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 827 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 828 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 829 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 830 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 831 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 832 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 833 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 834 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 835 * queue gets full. 836 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 837 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 838 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 839 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 840 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 841 * should kick the MLME state machine. 842 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 843 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 844 * status to user space) 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 847 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 849 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 850 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 851 * handled properly by the device. 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 853 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 854 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 856 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 857 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 859 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 860 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 861 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 862 * PS-Poll responses. 863 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 864 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 865 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 866 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 867 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 868 * monitor injection). 869 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 870 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 871 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 872 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 873 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 874 * 875 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 876 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 877 */ 878 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 879 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 880 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 884 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 885 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 887 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 888 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 889 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 890 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 891 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 892 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 893 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 894 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 895 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 896 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 897 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 898 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 899 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 900 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 901 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 902 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 903 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 904 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 905 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 906 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 907 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 908 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 909 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 910 }; 911 912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 913 914 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 915 916 /** 917 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 918 * 919 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 920 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 922 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 924 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 925 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 926 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 928 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 929 * it can be sent out. 930 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 931 * has already been assigned to this frame. 932 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 933 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 934 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 935 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 936 * for sequence number assignment 937 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 938 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 939 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 940 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 941 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 942 * it's intended for an MLD. 943 * 944 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 945 */ 946 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 947 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 948 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 949 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 950 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 951 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 952 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 953 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 954 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 955 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 956 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 957 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 958 }; 959 960 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 961 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 962 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 963 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 964 965 /** 966 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 967 * 968 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 969 * 970 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 971 */ 972 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 973 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 974 }; 975 976 /* 977 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 978 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 979 */ 980 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 981 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 982 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 983 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 984 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 985 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 986 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 987 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 988 989 /** 990 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 991 * Rate Control algorithm. 992 * 993 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 994 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 995 * 996 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 997 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 998 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1002 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1003 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1004 * Greenfield mode. 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1006 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1008 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1009 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1010 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1011 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1013 */ 1014 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1015 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1016 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1017 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1018 1019 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1020 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1021 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1022 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1023 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1024 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1025 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1026 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1027 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1028 }; 1029 1030 1031 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1032 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1033 1034 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1035 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1036 1037 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1038 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1039 1040 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1041 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1042 1043 /** 1044 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1045 * 1046 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1047 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1048 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1049 * 1050 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1051 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1052 * 1053 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1054 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1055 * 1056 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1057 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1058 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1059 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1060 * information:: 1061 * 1062 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1063 * 1064 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1065 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1066 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1067 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1068 * information should then contain:: 1069 * 1070 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1071 * 1072 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1073 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1074 */ 1075 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1076 s8 idx; 1077 u16 count:5, 1078 flags:11; 1079 } __packed; 1080 1081 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1082 1083 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1084 { 1085 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1086 } 1087 1088 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1089 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1090 { 1091 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1092 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1093 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1094 } 1095 1096 static inline u8 1097 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1098 { 1099 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1100 } 1101 1102 static inline u8 1103 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1104 { 1105 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1106 } 1107 1108 /** 1109 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1110 * 1111 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1112 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1113 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1114 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1115 * 1116 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1117 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1118 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1119 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1120 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1121 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1122 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1123 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1124 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1125 * @control: union part for control data 1126 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1127 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1128 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1129 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1130 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1131 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1132 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1133 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1134 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1135 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1136 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1137 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1138 * @pad: padding 1139 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1140 * @status: union part for status data 1141 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1142 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1143 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1144 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1145 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1146 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1147 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1148 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1149 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1150 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1151 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1152 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1153 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1154 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1155 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1156 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1157 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1158 */ 1159 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1160 /* common information */ 1161 u32 flags; 1162 u32 band:3, 1163 status_data_idr:1, 1164 status_data:13, 1165 hw_queue:4, 1166 tx_time_est:10; 1167 /* 1 free bit */ 1168 1169 union { 1170 struct { 1171 union { 1172 /* rate control */ 1173 struct { 1174 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1175 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1176 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1177 u8 use_rts:1; 1178 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1179 u8 short_preamble:1; 1180 u8 skip_table:1; 1181 1182 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1183 u8 antennas:2; 1184 1185 /* 14 bits free */ 1186 }; 1187 /* only needed before rate control */ 1188 unsigned long jiffies; 1189 }; 1190 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1192 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1193 u32 flags; 1194 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1195 } control; 1196 struct { 1197 u64 cookie; 1198 } ack; 1199 struct { 1200 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1201 s32 ack_signal; 1202 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1203 u8 ampdu_len; 1204 u8 antenna; 1205 u8 pad; 1206 u16 tx_time; 1207 u8 flags; 1208 u8 pad2; 1209 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1210 } status; 1211 struct { 1212 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1213 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1214 u8 pad[4]; 1215 1216 void *rate_driver_data[ 1217 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1218 }; 1219 void *driver_data[ 1220 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1221 }; 1222 }; 1223 1224 static inline u16 1225 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1226 { 1227 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1228 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1229 */ 1230 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1231 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1232 } 1233 1234 static inline u16 1235 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1236 { 1237 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1238 } 1239 1240 /*** 1241 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1242 * 1243 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1244 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1245 * 1246 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1247 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1248 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1249 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1250 * that was used when sending the packet. 1251 */ 1252 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1253 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1254 u8 try_count; 1255 u8 tx_power_idx; 1256 }; 1257 1258 /** 1259 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1260 * 1261 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1262 * @info: Basic tx status information 1263 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1264 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1265 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1266 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1267 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1268 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1269 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1270 */ 1271 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1273 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1274 struct sk_buff *skb; 1275 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1276 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1277 u8 n_rates; 1278 1279 struct list_head *free_list; 1280 }; 1281 1282 /** 1283 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1284 * 1285 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1286 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1287 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1288 * 1289 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1290 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1291 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1292 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1293 */ 1294 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1295 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1296 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1297 const u8 *common_ies; 1298 size_t common_ie_len; 1299 }; 1300 1301 1302 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1303 { 1304 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1305 } 1306 1307 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1308 { 1309 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1310 } 1311 1312 /** 1313 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1314 * 1315 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1316 * 1317 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1318 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1319 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1320 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1321 * 1322 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1323 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1324 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1325 */ 1326 static inline void 1327 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1328 { 1329 int i; 1330 1331 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1332 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1333 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1334 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1335 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1336 /* clear the rate counts */ 1337 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1338 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1339 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1340 } 1341 1342 1343 /** 1344 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1345 * 1346 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1347 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1348 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1349 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1350 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1351 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1352 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1353 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1354 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1355 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1356 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1357 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1358 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1359 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1360 * de-duplication by itself. 1361 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1362 * the frame. 1363 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1364 * the frame. 1365 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1366 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1367 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1368 * merging. 1369 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1370 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1371 * (including FCS) was received. 1372 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1373 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1374 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1375 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1376 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1377 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1378 * each A-MPDU 1379 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1380 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1381 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1382 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1383 * on this subframe 1384 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1385 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1386 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1387 * done by the hardware 1388 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1389 * processing it in any regular way. 1390 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1391 * them for sniffing purposes. 1392 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1393 * monitor interfaces. 1394 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1395 * them for sniffing purposes. 1396 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1397 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1398 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1399 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1400 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1401 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1402 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1403 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1404 * interleaved with other frames. 1405 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1406 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1407 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1408 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1409 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1410 * in the skb. 1411 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1412 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1413 * the first subframe. 1414 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1415 * be done in the hardware. 1416 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1417 * frame 1418 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1419 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1420 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1421 * 1422 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1423 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1424 * - DATA3_CODING 1425 * - DATA5_GI 1426 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1427 * - DATA6_NSTS 1428 * - DATA3_STBC 1429 * 1430 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1431 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1432 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1433 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1434 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1435 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1436 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1437 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1438 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1439 * hardware or driver) 1440 */ 1441 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1442 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1443 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1444 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1445 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1446 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1447 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1448 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1449 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1450 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1451 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1452 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1453 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1454 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1455 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1456 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1457 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1458 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1459 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1460 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1461 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1462 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1463 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1464 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1465 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1466 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1467 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1468 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1469 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1470 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1471 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1472 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1473 }; 1474 1475 /** 1476 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1477 * 1478 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1479 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1480 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1481 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1482 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1483 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1484 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1485 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1486 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1487 */ 1488 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1489 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1490 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1491 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1492 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1493 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1494 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1495 }; 1496 1497 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1498 1499 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1500 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1501 RX_ENC_HT, 1502 RX_ENC_VHT, 1503 RX_ENC_HE, 1504 RX_ENC_EHT, 1505 }; 1506 1507 /** 1508 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1509 * 1510 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1511 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1512 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1513 * 1514 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1515 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1516 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1517 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1518 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1519 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1520 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1521 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1522 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1523 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1524 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1525 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1526 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1527 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1528 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1529 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1530 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1531 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1532 * values were filled. 1533 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1534 * support dB or unspecified units) 1535 * @antenna: antenna used 1536 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1537 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1538 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1539 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1540 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1541 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1542 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1543 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1544 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1545 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1546 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1547 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1548 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1549 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1550 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1551 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1552 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1553 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1554 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1555 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1556 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1557 * @link_valid. 1558 */ 1559 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1560 u64 mactime; 1561 union { 1562 u64 boottime_ns; 1563 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1564 }; 1565 u32 device_timestamp; 1566 u32 ampdu_reference; 1567 u32 flag; 1568 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1569 u8 enc_flags; 1570 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1571 union { 1572 struct { 1573 u8 he_ru:3; 1574 u8 he_gi:2; 1575 u8 he_dcm:1; 1576 }; 1577 struct { 1578 u8 ru:4; 1579 u8 gi:2; 1580 } eht; 1581 }; 1582 u8 rate_idx; 1583 u8 nss; 1584 u8 rx_flags; 1585 u8 band; 1586 u8 antenna; 1587 s8 signal; 1588 u8 chains; 1589 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1590 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1591 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1592 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1593 }; 1594 1595 static inline u32 1596 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1597 { 1598 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1599 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1600 } 1601 1602 /** 1603 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1604 * 1605 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1606 * 1607 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1608 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1609 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1610 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1611 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1612 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1613 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1614 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1615 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1616 * for more. 1617 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1618 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1619 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1620 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1621 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1622 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1623 * operating channel. 1624 */ 1625 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1626 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1627 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1628 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1629 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1630 }; 1631 1632 1633 /** 1634 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1635 * 1636 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1637 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1638 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1639 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1640 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1641 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1642 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1643 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1644 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1645 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1646 */ 1647 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1648 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1649 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1650 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1651 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1652 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1653 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1654 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1655 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1656 }; 1657 1658 /** 1659 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1660 * 1661 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1662 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1663 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1664 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1665 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1666 */ 1667 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1668 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1669 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1670 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1671 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1672 1673 /* keep last */ 1674 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1675 }; 1676 1677 /** 1678 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1679 * 1680 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1681 * 1682 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1683 * 1684 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1685 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1686 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1687 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1688 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1689 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1690 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1691 * 1692 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1693 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1694 * 1695 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1696 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1697 * 1698 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1699 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1700 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1701 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1702 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1703 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1704 * 1705 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1706 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1707 * configured for an HT channel. 1708 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1709 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1710 */ 1711 struct ieee80211_conf { 1712 u32 flags; 1713 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1714 1715 u16 listen_interval; 1716 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1717 1718 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1719 1720 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1721 bool radar_enabled; 1722 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1723 }; 1724 1725 /** 1726 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1727 * 1728 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1729 * operation. 1730 * 1731 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1732 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1733 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1734 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1735 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1736 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1737 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1738 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1739 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1740 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1741 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1742 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1743 * channel, expressed in TU. 1744 */ 1745 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1746 u64 timestamp; 1747 u32 device_timestamp; 1748 bool block_tx; 1749 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1750 u8 count; 1751 u32 delay; 1752 }; 1753 1754 /** 1755 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1756 * 1757 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1758 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1759 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1760 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1761 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1762 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1763 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1764 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1765 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1766 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1767 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1768 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1769 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1770 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1771 * enabled for the interface. 1772 */ 1773 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1774 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1775 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1776 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1777 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1778 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 1779 }; 1780 1781 1782 /** 1783 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1784 * 1785 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1786 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1787 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1788 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1789 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1790 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1791 * mac80211. 1792 */ 1793 1794 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1795 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1796 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1797 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1798 }; 1799 1800 /** 1801 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1802 * @assoc: association status 1803 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1804 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1805 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1806 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1807 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1808 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D2.2 Figure 9-1002k. 1809 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 1810 * P802.11be_D2.2 Figure 9-1002j. 1811 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1812 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1813 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1814 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1815 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1816 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1817 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1818 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1819 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1820 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1821 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1822 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1823 * your driver/device needs to do. 1824 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1825 * (station mode only) 1826 */ 1827 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1828 /* association related data */ 1829 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1830 bool ibss_creator; 1831 bool ps; 1832 u16 aid; 1833 u16 eml_cap; 1834 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 1835 1836 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1837 int arp_addr_cnt; 1838 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1839 size_t ssid_len; 1840 bool s1g; 1841 bool idle; 1842 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1843 }; 1844 1845 /** 1846 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1847 * 1848 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1849 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1850 * 1851 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1852 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1853 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1854 * or the BSS we're associated to 1855 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1856 * indexed by link ID 1857 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1858 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1859 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1860 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1861 * @dormant_links: bitmap of valid but disabled links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1862 * Must be a subset of valid_links. 1863 * @addr: address of this interface 1864 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1865 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1866 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1867 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 1868 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 1869 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 1870 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1871 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1872 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1873 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1874 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1875 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1876 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1877 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1878 * restrictions. 1879 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1880 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1881 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1882 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1883 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1884 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1885 * interface. 1886 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1887 * for this interface. 1888 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1889 * sizeof(void \*). 1890 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 1891 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1892 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1893 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1894 */ 1895 struct ieee80211_vif { 1896 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1897 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1898 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1899 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1900 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links; 1901 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1902 bool p2p; 1903 1904 u8 cab_queue; 1905 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1906 1907 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1908 1909 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 1910 u32 driver_flags; 1911 u32 offload_flags; 1912 1913 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1914 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1915 #endif 1916 1917 bool probe_req_reg; 1918 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1919 1920 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1921 1922 /* must be last */ 1923 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1924 }; 1925 1926 /** 1927 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 1928 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 1929 * Return: the usable link bitmap 1930 */ 1931 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1932 { 1933 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 1934 } 1935 1936 /** 1937 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 1938 * @vif: the vif 1939 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 1940 */ 1941 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1942 { 1943 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 1944 return vif->valid_links != 0; 1945 } 1946 1947 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 1948 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 1949 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 1950 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 1951 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 1952 1953 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1954 { 1955 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1956 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1957 #endif 1958 return false; 1959 } 1960 1961 /** 1962 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1963 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1964 * 1965 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1966 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1967 * 1968 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1969 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1970 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1971 */ 1972 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1973 1974 /** 1975 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1976 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1977 * 1978 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1979 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1980 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1981 */ 1982 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1983 1984 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1985 { 1986 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 1987 } 1988 1989 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 1990 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1991 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 1992 1993 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 1994 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1995 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 1996 1997 /** 1998 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1999 * 2000 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2001 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2002 * 2003 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2004 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2005 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2006 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2007 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2008 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2009 * generation in software. 2010 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2011 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2012 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2013 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2014 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2015 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2016 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2017 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2018 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2019 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2020 * MIC. 2021 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2022 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2023 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2024 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2025 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2026 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2027 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2028 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2029 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2030 * only for management frames (MFP). 2031 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2032 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2033 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2034 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2035 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2036 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2037 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2038 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2039 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 2040 * generation only 2041 */ 2042 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2043 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2044 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2045 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2046 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2047 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2048 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2049 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2050 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2051 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2052 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2053 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2054 }; 2055 2056 /** 2057 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2058 * 2059 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2060 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2061 * 2062 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2063 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2064 * encrypted in hardware. 2065 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2066 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2067 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2068 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2069 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 2070 * @keylen: key material length 2071 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2072 * data block: 2073 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2074 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2075 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2076 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2077 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2078 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2079 */ 2080 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2081 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2082 u32 cipher; 2083 u8 icv_len; 2084 u8 iv_len; 2085 u8 hw_key_idx; 2086 s8 keyidx; 2087 u16 flags; 2088 s8 link_id; 2089 u8 keylen; 2090 u8 key[]; 2091 }; 2092 2093 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2094 2095 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2096 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2097 2098 /** 2099 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2100 * 2101 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2102 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2103 * reverse order than in packet) 2104 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2105 * reverse order than in packet) 2106 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2107 * reverse order than in packet) 2108 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2109 * reverse order than in packet) 2110 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2111 */ 2112 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2113 union { 2114 struct { 2115 u32 iv32; 2116 u16 iv16; 2117 } tkip; 2118 struct { 2119 u8 pn[6]; 2120 } ccmp; 2121 struct { 2122 u8 pn[6]; 2123 } aes_cmac; 2124 struct { 2125 u8 pn[6]; 2126 } aes_gmac; 2127 struct { 2128 u8 pn[6]; 2129 } gcmp; 2130 struct { 2131 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2132 u8 seq_len; 2133 } hw; 2134 }; 2135 }; 2136 2137 /** 2138 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2139 * 2140 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2141 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2142 * 2143 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2144 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2145 */ 2146 enum set_key_cmd { 2147 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2148 }; 2149 2150 /** 2151 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2152 * 2153 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2154 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2155 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2156 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2157 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2158 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2159 */ 2160 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2161 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2162 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2163 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2164 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2165 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2166 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2167 }; 2168 2169 /** 2170 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2171 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2172 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2173 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2174 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2175 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2176 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2177 * 2178 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2179 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2180 */ 2181 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2182 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2183 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2184 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2185 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2186 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2187 }; 2188 2189 /** 2190 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2191 * 2192 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2193 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2194 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2195 */ 2196 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2197 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2198 struct { 2199 s8 idx; 2200 u8 count; 2201 u8 count_cts; 2202 u8 count_rts; 2203 u16 flags; 2204 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2205 }; 2206 2207 /** 2208 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2209 * 2210 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2211 * 2212 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2213 * to the STA. 2214 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2215 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2216 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2217 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2218 * per peer TPC. 2219 */ 2220 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2221 s16 power; 2222 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2223 }; 2224 2225 /** 2226 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2227 * 2228 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2229 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2230 * 2231 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2232 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2233 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2234 * 2235 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2236 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2237 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2238 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2239 * 2240 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2241 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2242 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2243 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2244 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2245 */ 2246 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2247 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2248 2249 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2250 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2251 }; 2252 2253 /** 2254 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2255 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2256 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2257 * 2258 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2259 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2260 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2261 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2262 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2263 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2264 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2265 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2266 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2267 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2268 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2269 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2270 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2271 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2272 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2273 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2274 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2275 * the station moves to associated state. 2276 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2277 * 2278 */ 2279 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2280 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2281 2282 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2283 u8 link_id; 2284 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2285 2286 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2287 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2288 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2289 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2290 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2291 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2292 2293 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2294 2295 u8 rx_nss; 2296 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2297 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2298 }; 2299 2300 /** 2301 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2302 * 2303 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2304 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2305 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2306 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2307 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2308 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2309 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2310 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2311 * 2312 * @addr: MAC address 2313 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2314 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2315 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2316 * Can be modified by driver. 2317 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2318 * otherwise always false) 2319 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2320 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2321 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2322 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2323 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2324 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2325 * @rates: rate control selection table 2326 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2327 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2328 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2329 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2330 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2331 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2332 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2333 * unlimited. 2334 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2335 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2336 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2337 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2338 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2339 * is used for non-data frames 2340 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2341 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2342 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2343 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2344 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2345 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2346 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2347 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2348 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2349 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2350 * by the AP. 2351 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2352 */ 2353 struct ieee80211_sta { 2354 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2355 u16 aid; 2356 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2357 bool wme; 2358 u8 uapsd_queues; 2359 u8 max_sp; 2360 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2361 bool tdls; 2362 bool tdls_initiator; 2363 bool mfp; 2364 bool mlo; 2365 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2366 2367 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2368 2369 bool support_p2p_ps; 2370 2371 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2372 2373 u16 valid_links; 2374 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2375 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2376 2377 /* must be last */ 2378 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2379 }; 2380 2381 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2382 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2383 #else 2384 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2385 { 2386 return true; 2387 } 2388 #endif 2389 2390 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2391 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2392 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2393 2394 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2395 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2396 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2397 2398 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2399 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2400 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2401 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2402 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2403 2404 /** 2405 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2406 * 2407 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2408 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2409 * 2410 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2411 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2412 */ 2413 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2414 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2415 }; 2416 2417 /** 2418 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2419 * 2420 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2421 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2422 */ 2423 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2424 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2425 }; 2426 2427 /** 2428 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2429 * 2430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2431 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2432 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2433 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2434 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2435 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2436 * 2437 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2438 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2439 */ 2440 struct ieee80211_txq { 2441 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2442 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2443 u8 tid; 2444 u8 ac; 2445 2446 /* must be last */ 2447 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2448 }; 2449 2450 /** 2451 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2452 * 2453 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2454 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2455 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2456 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2457 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2458 * 2459 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2460 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2461 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2462 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2463 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2464 * algorithm. 2465 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2466 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2467 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2468 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2469 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2470 * CCK frames. 2471 * 2472 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2473 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2474 * the FCS at the end. 2475 * 2476 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2477 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2478 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2479 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2480 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2481 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2482 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2483 * 2484 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2485 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2486 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2487 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2488 * 2489 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2490 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2491 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2492 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2493 * 2494 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2495 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2496 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2497 * 2498 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2499 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2500 * 2501 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2502 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2503 * 2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2505 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2506 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2507 * 2508 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2509 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2510 * 2511 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2512 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2513 * 2514 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2515 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2516 * the stack. 2517 * 2518 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2519 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2520 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2521 * 2522 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2523 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2524 * dtim_period). 2525 * 2526 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2527 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2528 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2529 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2530 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2531 * only in that case. 2532 * 2533 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2534 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2535 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2536 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2537 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2538 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2539 * 2540 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2541 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2542 * software. 2543 * 2544 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2545 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2546 * active interfaces. 2547 * 2548 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2549 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2550 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2551 * 2552 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2553 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2554 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2555 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2556 * supported cipher suites. 2557 * 2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2559 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2560 * for frames. 2561 * 2562 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2563 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2564 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2565 * control for more details. 2566 * 2567 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2568 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2569 * 2570 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2571 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2572 * is supported. 2573 * 2574 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2575 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2576 * 2577 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2578 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2579 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2580 * 2581 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2582 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2583 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2584 * CSA frame. 2585 * 2586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2587 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2588 * 2589 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2590 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2591 * 2592 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2593 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2594 * 2595 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2596 * within A-MPDU. 2597 * 2598 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2599 * for sent beacons. 2600 * 2601 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2602 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2603 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2604 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2605 * 2606 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2607 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2608 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2609 * timeout. 2610 * 2611 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2612 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2613 * 2614 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2615 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2616 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2617 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2618 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2619 * 2620 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2621 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2622 * 2623 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2624 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2625 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2626 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2627 * 2628 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2629 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2630 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2631 * 2632 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2633 * TDLS links. 2634 * 2635 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2636 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2637 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2638 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2639 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2640 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2641 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2642 * 2643 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2644 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2645 * 2646 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2647 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2648 * 2649 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2650 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2651 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2652 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2653 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2654 * 2655 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2656 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2657 * TXQs to start with. 2658 * 2659 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2660 * length in tx status information 2661 * 2662 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2663 * 2664 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2665 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2666 * 2667 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2668 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2669 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2670 * 2671 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2672 * offload 2673 * 2674 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2675 * offload 2676 * 2677 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2678 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2679 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2680 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2681 * the stack. 2682 * 2683 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2684 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2685 * 2686 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2687 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2688 * 2689 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2690 */ 2691 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2692 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2693 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2694 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2695 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2696 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2697 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2698 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2699 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2700 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2701 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2702 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2703 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2704 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2705 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2706 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2707 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2708 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2709 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2710 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2711 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2712 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2713 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2714 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2715 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2716 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2717 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2718 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2719 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2720 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2721 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2722 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2723 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2724 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2725 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2726 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2727 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2728 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2729 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2730 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2731 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2732 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2733 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2734 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2735 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2736 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2737 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2738 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2739 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2740 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2741 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2742 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2743 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2744 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2745 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2746 2747 /* keep last, obviously */ 2748 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2749 }; 2750 2751 /** 2752 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2753 * 2754 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2755 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2756 * 2757 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2758 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2759 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2760 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2761 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2762 * 2763 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2764 * 2765 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2766 * along with this structure. 2767 * 2768 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2769 * 2770 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2771 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2772 * 2773 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2774 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2775 * 2776 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2777 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2778 * 2779 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2780 * that HW supports 2781 * 2782 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2783 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2784 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2785 * 2786 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2787 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2788 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2789 * 2790 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2791 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2792 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2793 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2794 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2795 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2796 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2797 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2798 * 2799 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2800 * can handle. 2801 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2802 * the hw can report back. 2803 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2804 * 2805 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2806 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2807 * aggregation. 2808 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2809 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2810 * it shouldn't be set. 2811 * 2812 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2813 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2814 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2815 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2816 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2817 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2818 * 2819 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2820 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2821 * 2822 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2823 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2824 * 2825 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2826 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2827 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2828 * adding _BW is supported today. 2829 * 2830 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2831 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2832 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2833 * 2834 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2835 * 2836 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2837 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2838 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2839 * device_timestamp. 2840 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2841 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2842 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2843 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2844 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2845 * 2846 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2847 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2848 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2849 * 2850 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2851 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2852 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2853 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2854 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2855 * neither enabled. 2856 * 2857 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2858 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2859 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2860 * 2861 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2862 * device. 2863 * 2864 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2865 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2866 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2867 * 2868 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2869 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2870 * 2871 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2872 * 2873 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2874 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2875 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2876 * 2877 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2878 */ 2879 struct ieee80211_hw { 2880 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2881 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2882 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2883 void *priv; 2884 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2885 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2886 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2887 int vif_data_size; 2888 int sta_data_size; 2889 int chanctx_data_size; 2890 int txq_data_size; 2891 u16 queues; 2892 u16 max_listen_interval; 2893 s8 max_signal; 2894 u8 max_rates; 2895 u8 max_report_rates; 2896 u8 max_rate_tries; 2897 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2898 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2899 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2900 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2901 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2902 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2903 struct { 2904 int units_pos; 2905 s16 accuracy; 2906 } radiotap_timestamp; 2907 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2908 u8 uapsd_queues; 2909 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2910 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2911 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2912 u8 weight_multiplier; 2913 u32 max_mtu; 2914 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2915 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2916 }; 2917 2918 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2919 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2920 { 2921 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2922 } 2923 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2924 2925 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2926 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2927 { 2928 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2929 } 2930 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2931 2932 /** 2933 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2934 * 2935 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2936 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2937 */ 2938 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2939 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2940 2941 /* Keep last */ 2942 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2943 }; 2944 2945 /** 2946 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2947 * 2948 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2949 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2950 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2951 * @status: channel-switch response status 2952 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2953 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2954 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2955 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2956 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2957 */ 2958 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2959 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2960 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2961 u8 action_code; 2962 u32 status; 2963 u32 timestamp; 2964 u16 switch_time; 2965 u16 switch_timeout; 2966 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2967 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2968 }; 2969 2970 /** 2971 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2972 * 2973 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2974 * 2975 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2976 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2977 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2978 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2979 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2980 * 2981 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2982 */ 2983 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2984 2985 /** 2986 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2987 * 2988 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2989 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2990 */ 2991 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2992 { 2993 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2994 } 2995 2996 /** 2997 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2998 * 2999 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3000 * @addr: the address to set 3001 */ 3002 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3003 { 3004 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3005 } 3006 3007 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3008 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3009 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3010 { 3011 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3012 return NULL; 3013 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3014 } 3015 3016 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3017 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3018 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3019 { 3020 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3021 return NULL; 3022 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3023 } 3024 3025 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3026 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3027 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3028 { 3029 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3030 return NULL; 3031 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3032 } 3033 3034 /** 3035 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3036 * @hw: the hardware 3037 * @skb: the skb 3038 * 3039 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3040 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3041 */ 3042 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3043 3044 /** 3045 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3046 * 3047 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3048 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3049 * 3050 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3051 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3052 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3053 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3054 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3055 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3056 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3057 * 3058 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3059 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3060 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3061 * 3062 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3063 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3064 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3065 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3066 * 3067 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3068 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3069 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3070 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3071 * 3072 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3073 * 3074 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3075 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3076 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3077 * based on the receive flags. 3078 * 3079 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3080 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3081 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3082 * keys. 3083 * 3084 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3085 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3086 * handler. 3087 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3088 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3089 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3090 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3091 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3092 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3093 * 3094 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3095 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3096 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3097 * 3098 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3099 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3100 * requirements: 3101 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3102 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3103 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3104 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3105 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3106 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3107 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3108 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3109 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3110 */ 3111 3112 /** 3113 * DOC: Powersave support 3114 * 3115 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3116 * 3117 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3118 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3119 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3120 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3121 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3122 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3123 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3124 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3125 * 3126 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3127 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3128 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3129 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3130 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3131 * 3132 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3133 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3134 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3135 * 3136 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3137 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3138 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3139 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3140 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3141 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3142 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3143 * 3144 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3145 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3146 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3147 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3148 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3149 * periods. 3150 * 3151 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3152 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3153 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3154 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3155 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3156 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3157 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3158 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3159 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3160 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3161 * 3162 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3163 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3164 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3165 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3166 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3167 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3168 * 3169 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3170 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3171 */ 3172 3173 /** 3174 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3175 * 3176 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3177 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3178 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3179 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3180 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3181 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3182 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3183 * 3184 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3185 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3186 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3187 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3188 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3189 * 3190 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3191 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3192 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3193 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3194 * 3195 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3196 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3197 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3198 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3199 * 3200 * - a list of information element IDs 3201 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3202 * 3203 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3204 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3205 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3206 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3207 * vendor information elements. 3208 * 3209 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3210 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3211 * 3212 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3213 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3214 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3215 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3216 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3217 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3218 * 3219 * 3220 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3221 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3222 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3223 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3224 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3225 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3226 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3227 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3228 * 3229 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3230 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3231 * signal strength threshold checking. 3232 */ 3233 3234 /** 3235 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3236 * 3237 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3238 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3239 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3240 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3241 * 3242 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3243 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3244 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3245 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3246 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3247 * hardware flags. 3248 * 3249 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3250 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3251 * turned off otherwise. 3252 * 3253 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3254 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3255 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3256 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3257 */ 3258 3259 /** 3260 * DOC: Frame filtering 3261 * 3262 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3263 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3264 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3265 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3266 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3267 * 3268 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3269 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3270 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3271 * 3272 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3273 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3274 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3275 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3276 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3277 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3278 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3279 * 3280 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3281 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3282 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3283 * or dropped. 3284 * 3285 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3286 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3287 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3288 * the flag, but not clear it. 3289 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3290 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3291 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3292 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3293 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3294 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3295 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3296 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3297 */ 3298 3299 /** 3300 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3301 * 3302 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3303 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3304 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3305 * 3306 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3307 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3308 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3309 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3310 * the driver code. 3311 * 3312 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3313 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3314 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3315 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3316 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3317 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3318 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3319 * 3320 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3321 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3322 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3323 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3324 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3325 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3326 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3327 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3328 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3329 * @sta_notify callback. 3330 * 3331 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3332 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3333 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3334 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3335 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3336 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3337 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3338 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3339 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3340 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3341 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3342 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3343 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3344 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3345 * 3346 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3347 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3348 * 3349 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3350 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3351 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3352 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3353 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3354 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3355 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3356 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3357 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3358 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3359 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3360 * 3361 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3362 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3363 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3364 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3365 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3366 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3367 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3368 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3369 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3370 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3371 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3372 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3373 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3374 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3375 * 3376 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3377 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3378 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3379 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3380 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3381 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3382 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3383 * 3384 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3385 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3386 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3387 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3388 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3389 * 3390 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3391 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3392 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3393 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3394 */ 3395 3396 /** 3397 * DOC: HW queue control 3398 * 3399 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3400 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3401 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3402 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3403 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3404 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3405 * 3406 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3407 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3408 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3409 * 3410 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3411 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3412 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3413 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3414 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3415 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3416 * the hardware queue. 3417 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3418 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3419 * 3420 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3421 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3422 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3423 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3424 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3425 * 3426 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3427 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3428 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3429 * off-channel queue: 9 3430 * 3431 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3432 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3433 * 3434 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3435 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3436 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3437 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3438 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3439 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3440 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3441 * 3442 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3443 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3444 * 3445 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3446 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3447 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3448 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3449 */ 3450 3451 /** 3452 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3453 * 3454 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3455 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3456 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3457 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3458 * 3459 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3460 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3461 * multicast address. 3462 * 3463 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3464 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3465 * 3466 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3467 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3468 * 3469 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3470 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3471 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3472 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3473 * honour this flag if possible. 3474 * 3475 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3476 * station 3477 * 3478 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3479 * 3480 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3481 * 3482 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3483 * 3484 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3485 */ 3486 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3487 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3488 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3489 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3490 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3491 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3492 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3493 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3494 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3495 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3496 }; 3497 3498 /** 3499 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3500 * 3501 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3502 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3503 * 3504 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3505 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3506 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3507 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3508 * 3509 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3510 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3511 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3512 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3513 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3514 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3515 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3516 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3517 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3518 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3519 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3520 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3521 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3522 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3523 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3524 * session is gone and removes the station. 3525 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3526 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3527 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3528 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3529 */ 3530 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3531 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3532 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3533 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3534 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3535 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3536 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3537 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3538 }; 3539 3540 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3541 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3542 3543 /** 3544 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3545 * 3546 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3547 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3548 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3549 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3550 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3551 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3552 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3553 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3554 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3555 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3556 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3557 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3558 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3559 */ 3560 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3561 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3562 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3563 u16 tid; 3564 u16 ssn; 3565 u16 buf_size; 3566 bool amsdu; 3567 u16 timeout; 3568 }; 3569 3570 /** 3571 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3572 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3573 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3574 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3575 */ 3576 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3577 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3578 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3579 }; 3580 3581 /** 3582 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3583 * 3584 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3585 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3586 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3587 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3588 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3589 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3590 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3591 * the peer. 3592 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3593 * by the peer 3594 */ 3595 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3596 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3597 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3598 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3599 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3600 }; 3601 3602 /** 3603 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3604 * 3605 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3606 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3607 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3608 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3609 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3610 * 3611 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3612 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3613 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3614 */ 3615 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3616 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3617 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3618 }; 3619 3620 /** 3621 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3622 * 3623 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3624 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3625 * 3626 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3627 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3628 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3629 * of wowlan configuration) 3630 */ 3631 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3632 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3633 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3634 }; 3635 3636 /** 3637 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3638 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3639 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3640 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3641 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3642 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3643 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3644 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 3645 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3646 */ 3647 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3648 u16 duration; 3649 u16 subtype; 3650 u8 success:1; 3651 int link_id; 3652 }; 3653 3654 /** 3655 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3656 * 3657 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3658 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3659 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3660 * 3661 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3662 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3663 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3664 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3665 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3666 * Must be atomic. 3667 * 3668 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3669 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3670 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3671 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3672 * or zero. 3673 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3674 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3675 * is added. 3676 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3677 * 3678 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3679 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3680 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3681 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3682 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3683 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3684 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3685 * 3686 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3687 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3688 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3689 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3690 * reconfigured at resume time. 3691 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3692 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3693 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3694 * must return 1 from this function. 3695 * 3696 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3697 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3698 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3699 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3700 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3701 * 3702 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3703 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3704 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3705 * in suspend(). 3706 * 3707 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3708 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3709 * and @stop must be implemented. 3710 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3711 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3712 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3713 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3714 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3715 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3716 * 3717 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3718 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3719 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3720 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3721 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3722 * 3723 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3724 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3725 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3726 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3727 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3728 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3729 * MAC address of the device going away. 3730 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3731 * 3732 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3733 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3734 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3735 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3736 * 3737 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3738 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3739 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3740 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3741 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3742 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3743 * can sleep. 3744 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3745 * are not implemented. 3746 * 3747 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3748 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3749 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3750 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3751 * The callback can sleep. 3752 * 3753 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3754 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3755 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3756 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3757 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3758 * non-MLO connections. 3759 * The callback can sleep. 3760 * 3761 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3762 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3763 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3764 * 3765 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3766 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3767 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3768 * 3769 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3770 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3771 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3772 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3773 * which flags are changed. 3774 * This callback can sleep. 3775 * 3776 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3777 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3778 * 3779 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3780 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3781 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3782 * is enabled. 3783 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3784 * The callback can sleep. 3785 * 3786 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3787 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3788 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3789 * The callback must be atomic. 3790 * 3791 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3792 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3793 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3794 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3795 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3796 * 3797 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3798 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3799 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3800 * 3801 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3802 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3803 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3804 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3805 * that power save is disabled. 3806 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3807 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3808 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3809 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3810 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3811 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3812 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3813 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3814 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3815 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3816 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3817 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3818 * The callback can sleep. 3819 * 3820 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3821 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3822 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3823 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3824 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3825 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3826 * The callback can sleep. 3827 * 3828 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3829 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3830 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3831 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3832 * 3833 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3834 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3835 * 3836 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3837 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3838 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3839 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3840 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3841 * 3842 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3843 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3844 * this notification. 3845 * The callback can sleep. 3846 * 3847 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3848 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3849 * The callback can sleep. 3850 * 3851 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3852 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3853 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3854 * The callback must be atomic. 3855 * 3856 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3857 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3858 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3859 * should be set as well. 3860 * The callback can sleep. 3861 * 3862 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3863 * The callback can sleep. 3864 * 3865 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3866 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3867 * 3868 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3869 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3870 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3871 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3872 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3873 * This callback can sleep. 3874 * 3875 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 3876 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 3877 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 3878 * 3879 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3880 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 3881 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 3882 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 3883 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3884 * 3885 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3886 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3887 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3888 * callback can sleep. 3889 * 3890 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3891 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 3892 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3893 * callback can sleep. 3894 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 3895 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3896 * 3897 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3898 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3899 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3900 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3901 * 3902 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3903 * power for the station. 3904 * This callback can sleep. 3905 * 3906 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3907 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3908 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3909 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3910 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3911 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3912 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3913 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3914 * The callback can sleep. 3915 * 3916 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3917 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3918 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3919 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3920 * in @sta_state. 3921 * The callback can sleep. 3922 * 3923 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3924 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3925 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3926 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3927 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3928 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3929 * Must be atomic. 3930 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3931 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3932 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3933 * 3934 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3935 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3936 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3937 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3938 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3939 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3940 * The callback can sleep. 3941 * 3942 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3943 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3944 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3945 * The callback can sleep. 3946 * 3947 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3948 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3949 * required function. 3950 * The callback can sleep. 3951 * 3952 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3953 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3954 * required function. 3955 * The callback can sleep. 3956 * 3957 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3958 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3959 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3960 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3961 * The callback can sleep. 3962 * 3963 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3964 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3965 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3966 * TSF synchronization. 3967 * The callback can sleep. 3968 * 3969 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3970 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3971 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3972 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3973 * The callback can sleep. 3974 * 3975 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3976 * 3977 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3978 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3979 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3980 * The callback can sleep. 3981 * 3982 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3983 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3984 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3985 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3986 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3987 * 3988 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3989 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3990 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3991 * 3992 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3993 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3994 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3995 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3996 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3997 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3998 * The callback can sleep. 3999 * 4000 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4001 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4002 * The callback can sleep. 4003 * 4004 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4005 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4006 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4007 * completion of the channel switch. 4008 * 4009 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4010 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4011 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4012 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4013 * 4014 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4015 * 4016 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4017 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4018 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4019 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4020 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4021 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4022 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4023 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4024 * must be accepted in this case. 4025 * This callback may sleep. 4026 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4027 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4028 * 4029 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4030 * 4031 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4032 * 4033 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4034 * queues before entering power save. 4035 * 4036 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4037 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4038 * The callback can sleep. 4039 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4040 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4041 * The callback must be atomic. 4042 * 4043 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4044 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4045 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4046 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4047 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4048 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4049 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4050 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4051 * more-data bit must always be set. 4052 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4053 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4054 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4055 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4056 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4057 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4058 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4059 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4060 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4061 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4062 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4063 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4064 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4065 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4066 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4067 * This callback must be atomic. 4068 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4069 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4070 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4071 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4072 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4073 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4074 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4075 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4076 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4077 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4078 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4079 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4080 * This callback must be atomic. 4081 * 4082 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4083 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4084 * expected to return a static value. 4085 * 4086 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4087 * 4088 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4089 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4090 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4091 * expected to return a static value. 4092 * 4093 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4094 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4095 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4096 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4097 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4098 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4099 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 4100 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 4101 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 4102 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 4103 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 4104 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 4105 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4106 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4107 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4108 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4109 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4110 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4111 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4112 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4113 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4114 * 4115 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4116 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4117 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4118 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4119 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4120 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4121 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4122 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4123 * 4124 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4125 * This callback may sleep. 4126 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4127 * This callback may sleep. 4128 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4129 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4130 * channel context with different settings 4131 * This callback may sleep. 4132 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4133 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4134 * This callback may sleep. 4135 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4136 * unbound from vif. 4137 * This callback may sleep. 4138 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4139 * another, as specified in the list of 4140 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4141 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4142 * This callback may sleep. 4143 * 4144 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4145 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4146 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4147 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4148 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4149 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4150 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4151 * 4152 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4153 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4154 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4155 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4156 * This callback may sleep. 4157 * 4158 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4159 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4160 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4161 * 4162 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4163 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4164 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4165 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4166 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4167 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4168 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4169 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4170 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4171 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4172 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4173 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4174 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4175 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4176 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4177 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4178 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4179 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4180 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 4181 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4182 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4183 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4184 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4185 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4186 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4187 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4188 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4189 * 4190 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4191 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4192 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4193 * 4194 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4195 * and hardware limits. 4196 * 4197 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4198 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4199 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4200 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4201 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4202 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4203 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4204 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4205 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4206 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4207 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4208 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4209 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4210 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4211 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4212 * the function call. 4213 * 4214 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4215 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4216 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4217 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4218 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4219 * 4220 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4221 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4222 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4223 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4224 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4225 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4226 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4227 * changed parameters. 4228 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4229 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4230 * this call. 4231 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4232 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4233 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4234 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4235 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4236 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4237 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4238 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4239 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4240 * 4241 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4242 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4243 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4244 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4245 * This callback may sleep. 4246 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4247 * This callback may sleep. 4248 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4249 * 4-address mode 4250 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4251 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4252 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4253 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4254 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4255 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4256 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4257 * twt structure. 4258 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4259 * from the peer. 4260 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4261 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4262 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4263 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4264 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4265 * radar channel. 4266 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4267 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4268 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4269 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4270 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4271 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4272 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4273 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4274 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4275 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4276 * This callback can sleep. 4277 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4278 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4279 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4280 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4281 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4282 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4283 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4284 * that. 4285 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4286 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4287 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4288 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4289 */ 4290 struct ieee80211_ops { 4291 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4292 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4293 struct sk_buff *skb); 4294 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4295 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4296 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4297 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4298 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4299 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4300 #endif 4301 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4303 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4304 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4305 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4306 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4308 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4309 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4310 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4311 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4312 u64 changed); 4313 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4315 u64 changed); 4316 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4318 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4319 u64 changed); 4320 4321 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4322 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4323 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4324 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4325 4326 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4327 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4328 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4329 unsigned int changed_flags, 4330 unsigned int *total_flags, 4331 u64 multicast); 4332 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4334 unsigned int filter_flags, 4335 unsigned int changed_flags); 4336 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4337 bool set); 4338 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4339 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4340 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4341 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4343 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4345 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4346 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4348 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4349 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4351 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4352 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4353 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4354 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4355 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4357 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4358 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4359 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4361 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4362 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4363 const u8 *mac_addr); 4364 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4365 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4366 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4367 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4368 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4369 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4370 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4371 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4372 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4373 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4374 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4375 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4376 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4377 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4378 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4379 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4380 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4381 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4382 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4383 struct dentry *dir); 4384 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4385 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4386 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4387 struct dentry *dir); 4388 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4389 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4390 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4391 struct dentry *dir); 4392 #endif 4393 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4394 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4395 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4396 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4397 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4398 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4399 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4400 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4401 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4402 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4404 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4405 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4407 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4408 u32 changed); 4409 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4411 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4412 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4414 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4415 struct station_info *sinfo); 4416 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4417 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4418 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4419 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4420 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4421 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4422 u64 tsf); 4423 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4424 s64 offset); 4425 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4426 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4427 4428 /** 4429 * @ampdu_action: 4430 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4431 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4432 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4433 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4434 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4435 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4436 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4437 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4438 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4439 * 4440 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4441 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4442 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4443 * 4444 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4445 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4446 * 4447 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4448 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4449 * - ``TX: 81`` 4450 * 4451 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4452 * 4453 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4454 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4455 * if the session can start immediately. 4456 * 4457 * The callback can sleep. 4458 */ 4459 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4461 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4462 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4463 struct survey_info *survey); 4464 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4465 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4466 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4467 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4468 void *data, int len); 4469 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4470 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4471 void *data, int len); 4472 #endif 4473 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4474 u32 queues, bool drop); 4475 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4476 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4477 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4479 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4480 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4481 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4482 4483 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4485 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4486 int duration, 4487 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4488 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4490 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4491 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4492 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4493 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4494 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4495 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4496 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4498 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4499 4500 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4501 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4502 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4503 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4504 bool more_data); 4505 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4507 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4508 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4509 bool more_data); 4510 4511 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4513 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4514 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4515 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4516 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4518 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4519 4520 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4522 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4523 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4525 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4526 4527 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4529 unsigned int link_id); 4530 4531 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4532 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4533 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4534 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4535 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4536 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4537 u32 changed); 4538 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4540 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4541 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4542 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4544 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4545 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4546 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4547 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4548 int n_vifs, 4549 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4550 4551 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4552 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4553 4554 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4555 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4556 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4557 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4558 #endif 4559 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4561 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4562 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4564 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4565 4566 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4567 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4568 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4569 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4571 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4572 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4573 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4574 4575 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4576 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4577 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4578 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4579 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4580 int *dbm); 4581 4582 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4583 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4584 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4585 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4586 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4587 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4590 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4592 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4593 4594 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4595 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4596 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4597 4598 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4600 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4601 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4602 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4603 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4605 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4606 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4608 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4609 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4610 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4611 u8 instance_id); 4612 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4613 struct sk_buff *head, 4614 struct sk_buff *skb); 4615 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4617 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4618 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4619 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4620 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4621 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4622 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4624 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4625 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4626 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4628 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4629 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4631 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4632 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4633 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4634 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4635 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4636 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4637 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4638 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4640 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4641 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4642 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4643 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4644 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4645 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4647 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4648 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4649 struct net_device_path *path); 4650 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4651 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4652 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4653 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4654 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4657 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4658 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4659 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4660 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4661 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4663 struct net_device *dev, 4664 enum tc_setup_type type, 4665 void *type_data); 4666 }; 4667 4668 /** 4669 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4670 * 4671 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4672 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4673 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4674 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4675 * @priv_data_len. 4676 * 4677 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4678 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4679 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4680 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4681 * 4682 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4683 */ 4684 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4685 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4686 const char *requested_name); 4687 4688 /** 4689 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4690 * 4691 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4692 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4693 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4694 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4695 * @priv_data_len. 4696 * 4697 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4698 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4699 * 4700 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4701 */ 4702 static inline 4703 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4704 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4705 { 4706 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4707 } 4708 4709 /** 4710 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4711 * 4712 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4713 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4714 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4715 * 4716 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4717 * 4718 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4719 */ 4720 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4721 4722 /** 4723 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4724 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4725 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4726 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4727 */ 4728 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4729 int throughput; 4730 int blink_time; 4731 }; 4732 4733 /** 4734 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4735 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4736 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4737 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4738 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4739 */ 4740 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4741 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4742 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4743 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4744 }; 4745 4746 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4747 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4748 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4749 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4750 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4751 const char * 4752 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4753 unsigned int flags, 4754 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4755 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4756 #endif 4757 /** 4758 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4759 * 4760 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4761 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4762 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4763 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4764 * 4765 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4766 * 4767 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4768 */ 4769 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4770 { 4771 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4772 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4773 #else 4774 return NULL; 4775 #endif 4776 } 4777 4778 /** 4779 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4780 * 4781 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4782 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4783 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4784 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4785 * 4786 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4787 * 4788 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4789 */ 4790 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4791 { 4792 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4793 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4794 #else 4795 return NULL; 4796 #endif 4797 } 4798 4799 /** 4800 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4801 * 4802 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4803 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4804 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4805 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4806 * 4807 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4808 * 4809 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4810 */ 4811 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4812 { 4813 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4814 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4815 #else 4816 return NULL; 4817 #endif 4818 } 4819 4820 /** 4821 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4822 * 4823 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4824 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4825 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4826 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4827 * 4828 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4829 * 4830 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4831 */ 4832 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4833 { 4834 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4835 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4836 #else 4837 return NULL; 4838 #endif 4839 } 4840 4841 /** 4842 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4843 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4844 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4845 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4846 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4847 * 4848 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4849 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4850 * 4851 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4852 */ 4853 static inline const char * 4854 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4855 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4856 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4857 { 4858 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4859 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4860 blink_table_len); 4861 #else 4862 return NULL; 4863 #endif 4864 } 4865 4866 /** 4867 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4868 * 4869 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4870 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4871 * 4872 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4873 */ 4874 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4875 4876 /** 4877 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4878 * 4879 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4880 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4881 * before calling this function. 4882 * 4883 * @hw: the hardware to free 4884 */ 4885 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4886 4887 /** 4888 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4889 * 4890 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4891 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4892 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4893 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4894 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4895 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4896 * 4897 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4898 */ 4899 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4900 4901 /** 4902 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4903 * 4904 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4905 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4906 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4907 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4908 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4909 * 4910 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4911 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4912 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4913 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4914 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4915 * 4916 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4917 * 4918 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4919 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4920 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4921 * @list: the destination list 4922 */ 4923 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4924 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4925 4926 /** 4927 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4928 * 4929 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4930 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4931 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4932 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4933 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4934 * 4935 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4936 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4937 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4938 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4939 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4940 * 4941 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4942 * 4943 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4944 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4945 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4946 * @napi: the NAPI context 4947 */ 4948 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4949 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4950 4951 /** 4952 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4953 * 4954 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4955 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4956 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4957 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4958 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4959 * 4960 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4961 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4962 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4963 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4964 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4965 * 4966 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4967 * 4968 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4969 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4970 */ 4971 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4972 { 4973 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4974 } 4975 4976 /** 4977 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4978 * 4979 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4980 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4981 * 4982 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4983 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4984 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4985 * 4986 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4987 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4988 */ 4989 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4990 4991 /** 4992 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4993 * 4994 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4995 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4996 * 4997 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4998 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4999 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5000 * 5001 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5002 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5003 */ 5004 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5005 struct sk_buff *skb) 5006 { 5007 local_bh_disable(); 5008 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5009 local_bh_enable(); 5010 } 5011 5012 /** 5013 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5014 * 5015 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5016 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5017 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5018 * 5019 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5020 * 5021 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5022 * each other. 5023 * 5024 * @sta: currently connected sta 5025 * @start: start or stop PS 5026 * 5027 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5028 */ 5029 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5030 5031 /** 5032 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5033 * (in process context) 5034 * 5035 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5036 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5037 * applies. 5038 * 5039 * @sta: currently connected sta 5040 * @start: start or stop PS 5041 * 5042 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5043 */ 5044 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5045 bool start) 5046 { 5047 int ret; 5048 5049 local_bh_disable(); 5050 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5051 local_bh_enable(); 5052 5053 return ret; 5054 } 5055 5056 /** 5057 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5058 * @sta: currently connected station 5059 * 5060 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5061 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5062 * connected station was received. 5063 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5064 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5065 * be serialized. 5066 */ 5067 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5068 5069 /** 5070 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5071 * @sta: currently connected station 5072 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5073 * 5074 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5075 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5076 * from a connected station was received. 5077 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5078 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5079 * serialized. 5080 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5081 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5082 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5083 * checks. 5084 */ 5085 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5086 5087 /* 5088 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5089 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5090 */ 5091 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5092 5093 /** 5094 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5095 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5096 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5097 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5098 * 5099 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5100 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5101 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5102 * 5103 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5104 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5105 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5106 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5107 * 5108 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5109 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5110 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5111 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5112 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5113 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5114 * 5115 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5116 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5117 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5118 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5119 * use this API. 5120 */ 5121 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5122 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5123 5124 /** 5125 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5126 * 5127 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5128 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5129 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5130 * 5131 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5132 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5133 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5134 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5135 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5136 */ 5137 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5138 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5139 struct sk_buff *skb, 5140 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5141 int max_rates); 5142 5143 /** 5144 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5145 * 5146 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5147 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5148 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5149 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5150 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5151 * slow stations to starve). 5152 * 5153 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5154 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5155 */ 5156 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5157 u32 thr); 5158 5159 /** 5160 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5161 * 5162 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5163 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5164 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5165 * 5166 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5167 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5168 * @info: tx status information 5169 */ 5170 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5171 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5172 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5173 5174 /** 5175 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5176 * 5177 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5178 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5179 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5180 * 5181 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5182 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5183 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5184 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5185 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5186 * 5187 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5188 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5189 */ 5190 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5191 struct sk_buff *skb); 5192 5193 /** 5194 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5195 * 5196 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5197 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5198 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5199 * 5200 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5201 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5202 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5203 * 5204 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5205 * @status: tx status information 5206 */ 5207 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5208 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5209 5210 /** 5211 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5212 * 5213 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5214 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5215 * specific skbs. 5216 * 5217 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5218 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5219 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5220 * 5221 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5222 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5223 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5224 * @info: tx status information 5225 */ 5226 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5227 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5228 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5229 { 5230 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5231 .sta = sta, 5232 .info = info, 5233 }; 5234 5235 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5236 } 5237 5238 /** 5239 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5240 * 5241 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5242 * 5243 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5244 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5245 * for a single hardware. 5246 * 5247 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5248 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5249 */ 5250 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5251 struct sk_buff *skb) 5252 { 5253 local_bh_disable(); 5254 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5255 local_bh_enable(); 5256 } 5257 5258 /** 5259 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5260 * 5261 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5262 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5263 * 5264 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5265 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5266 * 5267 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5268 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5269 */ 5270 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5271 struct sk_buff *skb); 5272 5273 /** 5274 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5275 * 5276 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5277 * connected STA. 5278 * 5279 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5280 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5281 */ 5282 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5283 5284 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5285 5286 /** 5287 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5288 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5289 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5290 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5291 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5292 * should be ignored. 5293 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5294 */ 5295 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5296 u16 tim_offset; 5297 u16 tim_length; 5298 5299 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5300 u16 mbssid_off; 5301 }; 5302 5303 /** 5304 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5305 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5306 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5307 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5308 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5309 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5310 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5311 * 5312 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5313 * obtain the beacon template. 5314 * 5315 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5316 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5317 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5318 * applicable, the CSA count. 5319 * 5320 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5321 * 5322 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5323 */ 5324 struct sk_buff * 5325 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5327 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5328 unsigned int link_id); 5329 5330 /** 5331 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5332 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5333 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5334 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5335 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5336 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5337 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5338 * 5339 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5340 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5341 * requested index. 5342 * 5343 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5344 */ 5345 struct sk_buff * 5346 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5348 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5349 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5350 5351 /** 5352 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5353 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5354 * 5355 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5356 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5357 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5358 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5359 */ 5360 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5361 u8 cnt; 5362 struct { 5363 struct sk_buff *skb; 5364 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5365 } bcn[]; 5366 }; 5367 5368 /** 5369 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5370 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5371 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5372 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5373 * 5374 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5375 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5376 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5377 * one multiple BSSID element. 5378 * 5379 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5380 * 5381 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5382 * %NULL on error. 5383 */ 5384 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5385 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5387 unsigned int link_id); 5388 5389 /** 5390 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5391 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5392 * 5393 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5394 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5395 */ 5396 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5397 5398 /** 5399 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5400 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5402 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5403 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5404 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5405 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5406 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5407 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5408 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5409 * 5410 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5411 * obtain the beacon frame. 5412 * 5413 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5414 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5415 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5416 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5417 * 5418 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5419 * 5420 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5421 */ 5422 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5423 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5424 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5425 unsigned int link_id); 5426 5427 /** 5428 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5429 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5431 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5432 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5433 * 5434 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5435 * 5436 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5437 */ 5438 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5440 unsigned int link_id) 5441 { 5442 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5443 } 5444 5445 /** 5446 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5447 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5448 * 5449 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5450 * This function is called implicitly when 5451 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5452 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5453 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5454 * 5455 * Return: new countdown value 5456 */ 5457 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5458 5459 /** 5460 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5461 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5462 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5463 * 5464 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5465 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5466 * 5467 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5468 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5469 */ 5470 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5471 5472 /** 5473 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5474 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5475 * 5476 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5477 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5478 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5479 */ 5480 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5481 5482 /** 5483 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5485 * 5486 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5487 */ 5488 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5489 5490 /** 5491 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5492 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5493 * 5494 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5495 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5496 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5497 */ 5498 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5499 5500 /** 5501 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5502 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5503 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5504 * 5505 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5506 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5507 * 5508 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5509 * 5510 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5511 */ 5512 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5514 5515 /** 5516 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5517 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5518 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5519 * 5520 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5521 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5522 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5523 * 5524 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5525 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5526 * 5527 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5528 */ 5529 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5531 5532 /** 5533 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5534 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5535 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5536 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5537 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5538 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5539 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5540 * if at all possible 5541 * 5542 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5543 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5544 * BSSID and address is used. 5545 * 5546 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5547 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5548 * 5549 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5550 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5551 * 5552 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5553 */ 5554 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5556 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5557 5558 /** 5559 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5560 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5561 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5562 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5563 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5564 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5565 * 5566 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5567 * hardware. 5568 * 5569 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5570 */ 5571 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5572 const u8 *src_addr, 5573 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5574 size_t tailroom); 5575 5576 /** 5577 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5578 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5579 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5580 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5581 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5582 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5583 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5584 * 5585 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5586 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5587 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5588 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5589 */ 5590 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5591 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5592 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5593 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5594 5595 /** 5596 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5597 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5598 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5599 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5600 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5601 * 5602 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5603 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5604 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5605 * 5606 * Return: The duration. 5607 */ 5608 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5610 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5611 5612 /** 5613 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5614 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5615 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5616 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5617 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5618 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5619 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5620 * 5621 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5622 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5623 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5624 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5625 */ 5626 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5628 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5629 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5630 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5631 5632 /** 5633 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5634 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5635 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5636 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5637 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5638 * 5639 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5640 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5641 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5642 * 5643 * Return: The duration. 5644 */ 5645 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5647 size_t frame_len, 5648 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5649 5650 /** 5651 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5652 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5654 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5655 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5656 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5657 * 5658 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5659 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5660 * 5661 * Return: The duration. 5662 */ 5663 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5664 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5665 enum nl80211_band band, 5666 size_t frame_len, 5667 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5668 5669 /** 5670 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5671 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5672 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5673 * 5674 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5675 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5676 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5677 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5678 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5679 * 5680 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5681 * frames are available. 5682 * 5683 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5684 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5685 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5686 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5687 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5688 * use common code for all beacons. 5689 */ 5690 struct sk_buff * 5691 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5692 5693 /** 5694 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5695 * 5696 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5697 * 5698 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5699 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5700 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5701 */ 5702 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5703 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5704 5705 /** 5706 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5707 * 5708 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5709 * from the given packet. 5710 * 5711 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5712 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5713 * with this P1K 5714 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5715 */ 5716 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5717 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5718 { 5719 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5720 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5721 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5722 5723 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5724 } 5725 5726 /** 5727 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5728 * 5729 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5730 * and transmitter address. 5731 * 5732 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5733 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5734 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5735 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5736 */ 5737 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5738 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5739 5740 /** 5741 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5742 * 5743 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5744 * in the packet. 5745 * 5746 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5747 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5748 * encrypted with this key 5749 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5750 */ 5751 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5752 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5753 5754 /** 5755 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5756 * 5757 * @pos: start of crypto header 5758 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5759 * @pn: PN to add 5760 * 5761 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5762 * the packet payload) 5763 * 5764 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5765 * point to the crypto header) 5766 */ 5767 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5768 5769 /** 5770 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5771 * 5772 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5773 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5774 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5775 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5776 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5777 * 5778 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5779 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5780 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5781 * 5782 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5783 * can be done concurrently. 5784 */ 5785 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5786 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5787 5788 /** 5789 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5790 * 5791 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5792 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5793 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5794 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5795 * @seq: new sequence data 5796 * 5797 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5798 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5799 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5800 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5801 * 5802 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5803 * can be done concurrently. 5804 */ 5805 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5806 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5807 5808 /** 5809 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5810 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5811 * 5812 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5813 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5814 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5815 * 5816 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5817 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5818 */ 5819 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5820 5821 /** 5822 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5823 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5824 * @keyconf: new key data 5825 * 5826 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5827 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5828 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5829 * 5830 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5831 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5832 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5833 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5834 * 5835 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5836 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5837 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5838 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5839 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5840 * of the reconfiguration. 5841 * 5842 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5843 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5844 * 5845 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5846 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5847 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5848 * the key that's being replaced. 5849 */ 5850 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5851 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5852 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5853 5854 /** 5855 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5856 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5857 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5858 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5859 * @gfp: allocation flags 5860 */ 5861 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5862 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5863 5864 /** 5865 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5866 * 5867 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5868 * at the same time. 5869 * 5870 * @keyconf: the key in question 5871 */ 5872 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5873 5874 /** 5875 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5876 * 5877 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5878 * at the same time. 5879 * 5880 * @keyconf: the key in question 5881 */ 5882 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5883 5884 /** 5885 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5886 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5887 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5888 * 5889 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5890 */ 5891 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5892 5893 /** 5894 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5895 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5896 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5897 * 5898 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5899 */ 5900 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5901 5902 /** 5903 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5904 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5905 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5906 * 5907 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 5908 * 5909 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5910 */ 5911 5912 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5913 5914 /** 5915 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5916 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5917 * 5918 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 5919 */ 5920 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5921 5922 /** 5923 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5924 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5925 * 5926 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 5927 */ 5928 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5929 5930 /** 5931 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5932 * 5933 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5934 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5935 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5936 * any context, including hardirq context. 5937 * 5938 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5939 * @info: information about the completed scan 5940 */ 5941 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5942 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5943 5944 /** 5945 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5946 * 5947 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5948 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5949 * 5950 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5951 */ 5952 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5953 5954 /** 5955 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5956 * 5957 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5958 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5959 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5960 * while associating, for instance. 5961 * 5962 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5963 */ 5964 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5965 5966 /** 5967 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5968 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5969 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5970 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5971 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5972 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5973 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5974 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5975 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5976 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5977 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5978 * for instance. 5979 */ 5980 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5981 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5982 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5983 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5984 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5985 }; 5986 5987 /** 5988 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5989 * 5990 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5991 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5992 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5993 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5994 * 5995 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5996 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5997 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5998 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5999 */ 6000 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6001 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6003 void *data); 6004 6005 /** 6006 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6007 * 6008 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6009 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6010 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6011 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6012 * be used. 6013 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6014 * 6015 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6016 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6017 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6018 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6019 */ 6020 static inline void 6021 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6022 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6023 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6024 void *data) 6025 { 6026 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6027 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6028 iterator, data); 6029 } 6030 6031 /** 6032 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6033 * 6034 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6035 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6036 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6037 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6038 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6039 * 6040 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6041 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6042 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6043 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6044 */ 6045 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6046 u32 iter_flags, 6047 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6048 u8 *mac, 6049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6050 void *data); 6051 6052 /** 6053 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6054 * 6055 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6056 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6057 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6058 * 6059 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6060 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6061 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6062 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6063 */ 6064 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6065 u32 iter_flags, 6066 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6067 u8 *mac, 6068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6069 void *data); 6070 6071 /** 6072 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6073 * 6074 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6075 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6076 * function for them. 6077 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6078 * 6079 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6080 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6081 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6082 */ 6083 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6084 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6085 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6086 void *data); 6087 /** 6088 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6089 * 6090 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6091 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6092 * 6093 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6094 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6095 */ 6096 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6097 6098 /** 6099 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6100 * 6101 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6102 * workqueue. 6103 * 6104 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6105 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6106 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6107 */ 6108 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6109 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6110 unsigned long delay); 6111 6112 /** 6113 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6114 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6115 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6116 * 6117 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6118 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6119 * mac80211. 6120 * 6121 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6122 */ 6123 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6124 u16 tid); 6125 6126 /** 6127 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6128 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6129 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6130 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6131 * 6132 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6133 * 6134 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6135 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6136 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6137 */ 6138 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6139 u16 timeout); 6140 6141 /** 6142 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6144 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6145 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6146 * 6147 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6148 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6149 * from any context. 6150 */ 6151 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6152 u16 tid); 6153 6154 /** 6155 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6156 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6157 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6158 * 6159 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6160 * 6161 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6162 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6163 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6164 */ 6165 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6166 6167 /** 6168 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6169 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6170 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6171 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6172 * 6173 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6174 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6175 * can be called from any context. 6176 */ 6177 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6178 u16 tid); 6179 6180 /** 6181 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6182 * 6183 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6184 * @addr: station's address 6185 * 6186 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6187 * 6188 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6189 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6190 */ 6191 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6192 const u8 *addr); 6193 6194 /** 6195 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6196 * 6197 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6198 * @addr: remote station's address 6199 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6200 * 6201 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6202 * 6203 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6204 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6205 * 6206 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6207 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6208 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6209 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6210 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6211 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6212 * is not reliable. 6213 * 6214 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6215 */ 6216 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6217 const u8 *addr, 6218 const u8 *localaddr); 6219 6220 /** 6221 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6222 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6223 * @addr: remote station's link address 6224 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6225 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6226 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6227 * 6228 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6229 */ 6230 struct ieee80211_sta * 6231 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6232 const u8 *addr, 6233 const u8 *localaddr, 6234 unsigned int *link_id); 6235 6236 /** 6237 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6238 * @hw: the hardware 6239 * @pubsta: the station 6240 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6241 * 6242 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6243 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6244 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6245 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6246 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6247 * 6248 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6249 * manner. 6250 * 6251 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6252 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6253 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6254 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6255 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6256 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6257 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6258 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6259 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6260 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6261 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6262 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6263 * woke up while blocked or not. 6264 */ 6265 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6266 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6267 6268 /** 6269 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6270 * @pubsta: the station 6271 * 6272 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6273 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6274 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6275 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6276 * 6277 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6278 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6279 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6280 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6281 * 6282 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6283 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6284 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6285 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6286 */ 6287 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6288 6289 /** 6290 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6291 * @pubsta: the station 6292 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6293 * 6294 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6295 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6296 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6297 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6298 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6299 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6300 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6301 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6302 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6303 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6304 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6305 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6306 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6307 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6308 */ 6309 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6310 6311 /** 6312 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6313 * @pubsta: the station 6314 * 6315 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6316 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6317 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6318 * 6319 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6320 * there is no need to call this function. 6321 */ 6322 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6323 6324 /** 6325 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6326 * 6327 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6328 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6329 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6330 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6331 * 6332 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6333 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6334 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6335 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6336 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6337 * attempts. 6338 * 6339 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6340 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6341 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6342 * them to 0. 6343 * 6344 * @pubsta: the station 6345 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6346 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6347 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6348 */ 6349 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6350 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6351 6352 /** 6353 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6354 * 6355 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6356 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6357 * 6358 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6359 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6360 */ 6361 bool 6362 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6363 6364 /** 6365 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6366 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6367 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6368 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6369 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6370 * 6371 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6372 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6373 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6374 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6375 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6376 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6377 * 6378 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6379 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6380 * set_key callback. 6381 */ 6382 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6384 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6385 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6386 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6387 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6388 void *data), 6389 void *iter_data); 6390 6391 /** 6392 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6393 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6394 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6395 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6396 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6397 * 6398 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6399 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6400 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6401 * in removal process will be skipped. 6402 * 6403 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6404 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6405 */ 6406 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6408 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6409 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6410 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6411 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6412 void *data), 6413 void *iter_data); 6414 6415 /** 6416 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6417 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6418 * @iter: iterator function 6419 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6420 * 6421 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6422 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6423 * places while calling into the driver. 6424 * 6425 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6426 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6427 * removed. 6428 * 6429 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6430 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6431 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6432 * or not. 6433 */ 6434 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6435 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6436 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6437 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6438 void *data), 6439 void *iter_data); 6440 6441 /** 6442 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6443 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6444 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6445 * 6446 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6447 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6448 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6449 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6450 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6451 * %NULL. 6452 * 6453 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6454 */ 6455 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6457 6458 /** 6459 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6460 * 6461 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6462 * 6463 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6464 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6465 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6466 */ 6467 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6468 6469 /** 6470 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6471 * 6472 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6473 * 6474 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6475 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6476 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6477 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6478 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6479 * 6480 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6481 * without connection recovery attempts. 6482 */ 6483 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6484 6485 /** 6486 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6487 * 6488 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6489 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6490 * 6491 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6492 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6493 */ 6494 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6495 6496 /** 6497 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6498 * 6499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6500 * 6501 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6502 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6503 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6504 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6505 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6506 * 6507 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6508 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6509 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6510 * disconnect normally later. 6511 * 6512 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6513 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6514 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6515 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6516 */ 6517 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6518 6519 /** 6520 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6521 * hardware restart 6522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6523 * 6524 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6525 * hardware restart. 6526 */ 6527 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6528 6529 /** 6530 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6531 * rssi threshold triggered 6532 * 6533 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6534 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6535 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6536 * @gfp: context flags 6537 * 6538 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6539 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6540 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6541 */ 6542 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6543 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6544 s32 rssi_level, 6545 gfp_t gfp); 6546 6547 /** 6548 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6549 * 6550 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6551 * @gfp: context flags 6552 */ 6553 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6554 6555 /** 6556 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6557 * 6558 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6559 */ 6560 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6561 6562 /** 6563 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6564 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6565 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6566 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 6567 * false. 6568 * 6569 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6570 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6571 */ 6572 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 6573 unsigned int link_id); 6574 6575 /** 6576 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6577 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6578 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6579 * 6580 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6581 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6582 * a deauth frame in this case. 6583 */ 6584 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6585 bool block_tx); 6586 6587 /** 6588 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6589 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6590 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6591 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6592 * 6593 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6594 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6595 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6596 */ 6597 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6598 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6599 6600 /** 6601 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6602 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6603 */ 6604 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6605 6606 /** 6607 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6608 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6609 */ 6610 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6611 6612 /** 6613 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6614 * 6615 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6616 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6617 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6618 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6619 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6620 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6621 * 6622 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6623 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6624 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6625 */ 6626 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6627 const u8 *addr); 6628 6629 /** 6630 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6631 * @pubsta: station struct 6632 * @tid: the session's TID 6633 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6634 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6635 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6636 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6637 * 6638 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6639 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6640 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6641 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6642 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 6643 */ 6644 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6645 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6646 u16 received_mpdus); 6647 6648 /** 6649 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6650 * 6651 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6652 * buffer. 6653 * 6654 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6655 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6656 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6657 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6658 */ 6659 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6660 6661 /** 6662 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6663 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6664 * @addr: station mac address 6665 * @tid: the rx tid 6666 */ 6667 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6668 unsigned int tid); 6669 6670 /** 6671 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6672 * 6673 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6674 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6675 * reordering. 6676 * 6677 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6678 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6679 * 6680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6681 * @addr: station mac address 6682 * @tid: the rx tid 6683 */ 6684 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6685 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6686 { 6687 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6688 return; 6689 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6690 } 6691 6692 /** 6693 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6694 * 6695 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6696 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6697 * reordering. 6698 * 6699 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6700 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6701 * 6702 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6703 * @addr: station mac address 6704 * @tid: the rx tid 6705 */ 6706 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6707 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6708 { 6709 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6710 return; 6711 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6712 } 6713 6714 /** 6715 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6716 * 6717 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6718 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6719 * 6720 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6721 * 6722 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6723 * @addr: station mac address 6724 * @tid: the rx tid 6725 */ 6726 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6727 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6728 6729 /* Rate control API */ 6730 6731 /** 6732 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6733 * 6734 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6735 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6736 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6737 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6738 * to be filled in 6739 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6740 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6741 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6742 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6743 * RTS threshold 6744 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6745 * if the selected rate supports it 6746 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6747 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6748 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6749 */ 6750 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6751 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6752 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6753 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6754 struct sk_buff *skb; 6755 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6756 bool rts, short_preamble; 6757 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6758 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6759 bool bss; 6760 }; 6761 6762 /** 6763 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6764 */ 6765 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6766 /** 6767 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6768 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6769 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6770 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6771 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6772 */ 6773 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6774 /** 6775 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6776 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6777 */ 6778 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6779 }; 6780 6781 struct rate_control_ops { 6782 unsigned long capa; 6783 const char *name; 6784 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6785 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6786 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6787 void (*free)(void *priv); 6788 6789 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6790 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6791 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6792 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6793 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6794 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6795 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6796 u32 changed); 6797 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6798 void *priv_sta); 6799 6800 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6801 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6802 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6803 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6804 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6805 struct sk_buff *skb); 6806 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6807 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6808 6809 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6810 struct dentry *dir); 6811 6812 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6813 }; 6814 6815 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6816 enum nl80211_band band, 6817 int index) 6818 { 6819 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6820 } 6821 6822 static inline s8 6823 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6825 { 6826 int i; 6827 6828 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6829 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6830 return i; 6831 6832 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6833 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6834 6835 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6836 return 0; 6837 } 6838 6839 static inline 6840 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6842 { 6843 unsigned int i; 6844 6845 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6846 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6847 return true; 6848 return false; 6849 } 6850 6851 /** 6852 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6853 * 6854 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6855 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6856 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6857 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6858 * 6859 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6860 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6861 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6862 */ 6863 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6864 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6865 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6866 6867 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6868 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6869 6870 static inline bool 6871 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6872 { 6873 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6874 } 6875 6876 static inline bool 6877 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6878 { 6879 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6880 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6881 } 6882 6883 static inline bool 6884 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6885 { 6886 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6887 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6888 } 6889 6890 static inline bool 6891 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6892 { 6893 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6894 } 6895 6896 static inline bool 6897 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6898 { 6899 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6900 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6901 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6902 } 6903 6904 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6905 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6906 { 6907 if (p2p) { 6908 switch (type) { 6909 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6910 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6911 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6912 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6913 default: 6914 break; 6915 } 6916 } 6917 return type; 6918 } 6919 6920 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6921 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6922 { 6923 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6924 } 6925 6926 /** 6927 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 6928 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 6929 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 6930 * 6931 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 6932 */ 6933 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 6934 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6936 { 6937 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 6938 } 6939 6940 /** 6941 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 6942 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 6943 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 6944 * 6945 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 6946 */ 6947 static inline __le16 6948 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6950 { 6951 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 6952 } 6953 6954 /** 6955 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif 6956 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 6957 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 6958 * 6959 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 6960 */ 6961 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 6962 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6964 { 6965 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 6966 } 6967 6968 /** 6969 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6970 * 6971 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6972 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6973 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6974 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6975 * 6976 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6977 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6978 * matching GroupId management frame. 6979 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6980 */ 6981 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6982 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6983 6984 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6985 int rssi_min_thold, 6986 int rssi_max_thold); 6987 6988 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6989 6990 /** 6991 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6992 * 6993 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6994 * 6995 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6996 * 6997 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6998 * applicable. 6999 */ 7000 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7001 7002 /** 7003 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7004 * @vif: virtual interface 7005 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7006 * @gfp: allocation flags 7007 * 7008 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7009 */ 7010 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7011 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7012 gfp_t gfp); 7013 7014 /** 7015 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7016 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7017 * @vif: virtual interface 7018 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7019 * @band: the band to transmit on 7020 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7021 * 7022 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7023 */ 7024 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7026 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7027 7028 /** 7029 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7030 * of injected frames. 7031 * 7032 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7033 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7034 * of the skb before calling this function. 7035 * 7036 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7037 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7038 */ 7039 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7040 struct net_device *dev); 7041 7042 /** 7043 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7044 * 7045 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7046 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7047 * 7048 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7049 * 7050 * private: 7051 * 7052 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7053 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7054 */ 7055 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7056 u32 next_tsf; 7057 bool has_next_tsf; 7058 7059 u8 absent; 7060 7061 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7062 struct { 7063 u32 start; 7064 u32 duration; 7065 u32 interval; 7066 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7067 }; 7068 7069 /** 7070 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7071 * 7072 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7073 * @data: NoA tracking data 7074 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7075 * 7076 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7077 */ 7078 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7079 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7080 7081 /** 7082 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7083 * 7084 * @data: NoA tracking data 7085 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7086 */ 7087 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7088 7089 /** 7090 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7091 * @vif: virtual interface 7092 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7093 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7094 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7095 * @gfp: allocation flags 7096 * 7097 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7098 */ 7099 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7100 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7101 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7102 7103 /** 7104 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7105 * 7106 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7107 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7108 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7109 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7110 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7111 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7112 * 7113 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7114 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7115 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7116 * 7117 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7118 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7119 * 7120 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7121 */ 7122 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7123 7124 /** 7125 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7126 * 7127 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7128 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7129 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7130 * 7131 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7132 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7133 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7134 * 7135 * @sta: the station 7136 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7137 */ 7138 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7139 7140 /** 7141 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7142 * 7143 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7144 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7145 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7146 * 7147 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7148 * 7149 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7150 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7151 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7152 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7153 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7154 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7155 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7156 * 7157 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7158 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7159 */ 7160 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7161 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7162 7163 /** 7164 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7165 * (in process context) 7166 * 7167 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7168 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7169 * 7170 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7171 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7172 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7173 */ 7174 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7175 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7176 { 7177 struct sk_buff *skb; 7178 7179 local_bh_disable(); 7180 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7181 local_bh_enable(); 7182 7183 return skb; 7184 } 7185 7186 /** 7187 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7188 * 7189 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7190 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7191 * 7192 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7193 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7194 */ 7195 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7196 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7197 7198 /** 7199 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7200 * 7201 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7202 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7203 * 7204 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7205 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7206 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7207 */ 7208 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7209 7210 /** 7211 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7212 * 7213 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7214 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7215 * 7216 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7217 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7218 */ 7219 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7220 7221 /* (deprecated) */ 7222 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7223 { 7224 } 7225 7226 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7227 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7228 7229 /** 7230 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7231 * 7232 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7233 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7234 * 7235 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7236 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7237 * 7238 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7239 * this TXQ internally. 7240 */ 7241 static inline void 7242 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7243 { 7244 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7245 } 7246 7247 /** 7248 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7249 * 7250 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7251 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7252 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7253 * 7254 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7255 * internally. 7256 */ 7257 static inline void 7258 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7259 bool force) 7260 { 7261 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7262 } 7263 7264 /** 7265 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7266 * 7267 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7268 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7269 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7270 * next_txq(). 7271 * 7272 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7273 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7274 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7275 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7276 * again. 7277 * 7278 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7279 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7280 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7281 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7282 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7283 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7284 * 7285 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7286 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7287 */ 7288 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7289 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7290 7291 /** 7292 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7293 * 7294 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7295 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7296 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7297 * 7298 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7299 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7300 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7301 */ 7302 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7303 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7304 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7305 7306 /** 7307 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7308 * 7309 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7310 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7311 * 7312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7313 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7314 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7315 * @gfp: allocation flags 7316 */ 7317 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7318 u8 inst_id, 7319 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7320 gfp_t gfp); 7321 7322 /** 7323 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7324 * 7325 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7326 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7327 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7328 * 7329 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7330 * @match: match event information 7331 * @gfp: allocation flags 7332 */ 7333 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7334 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7335 gfp_t gfp); 7336 7337 /** 7338 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7339 * 7340 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7341 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7342 * 7343 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7344 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7345 * information. 7346 * @len: frame length in bytes 7347 */ 7348 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7349 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7350 int len); 7351 7352 /** 7353 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7354 * 7355 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7356 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7357 * 7358 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7359 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7360 * @len: frame length in bytes 7361 */ 7362 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7363 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7364 int len); 7365 /** 7366 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 7367 * 7368 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 7369 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 7370 * hardware or firmware. 7371 * 7372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7373 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 7374 */ 7375 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 7376 7377 /** 7378 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7379 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7380 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7381 * 7382 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7383 * 7384 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7385 */ 7386 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7388 7389 /** 7390 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7391 * probe response template. 7392 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7393 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7394 * 7395 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7396 * 7397 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7398 */ 7399 struct sk_buff * 7400 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7401 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7402 7403 /** 7404 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7405 * collision. 7406 * 7407 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7408 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7409 * aware of. 7410 * @gfp: allocation flags 7411 */ 7412 void 7413 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7414 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7415 7416 /** 7417 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7418 * 7419 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7420 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7421 * 7422 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7423 */ 7424 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7425 { 7426 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7427 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7428 7429 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7430 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7431 } 7432 7433 /** 7434 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7435 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7436 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7437 * 7438 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7439 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7440 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7441 * 7442 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7443 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7444 * a sequence of calls like 7445 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7446 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7447 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7448 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7449 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7450 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7451 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7452 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7453 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7454 * 7455 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not 7456 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a 7457 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks. 7458 */ 7459 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7460 7461 /** 7462 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7463 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7464 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7465 * 7466 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7467 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7468 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7469 * completed after it returns. 7470 */ 7471 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7472 u16 active_links); 7473 7474 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7475